Download Anna University B-Tech 1st Year First Year BS8161 Physics Lab Manual Question Paper

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
? m
2
N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
? m
2
N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSR
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
? m
2
N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSR
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
VSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSR
(div)
TR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

x
x+n
x+2n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+3n



Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?
= -----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41



1. What are ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
VSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSR
(div)
TR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

x
x+n
x+2n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+3n



Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?
= -----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41



1. What are ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Colour

Wavelength (?)

Violet

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
? m
2
N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSR
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42



Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue
Green

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Mean Width
of one band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(? )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 n
2 n+5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm



Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

Rubber band (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm



Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

Rubber band (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? .? ?
=
5?
5
= 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

100

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)


Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice



?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Position of the equal
masses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-2
s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m
T1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? kg

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depression
y for M kg

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 W
2 W+50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

MSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

VSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m

HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Particle size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
n
nD
d
x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C
Time
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
? m
2
N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSR
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42



Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue
Green

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Mean Width
of one band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(? )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
1 n
2 n+5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=
5?
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?
? .? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1?
100

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.



56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3
m)
Corrected Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.


To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Mean Width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of one band
(? )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2
l

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=
5?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? .? =
1?
100

= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Mean Width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of one band
(? )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2
l

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=
5?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? .? =
1?
100

= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)


Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)


Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
VSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSR
(div)
TR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

x
x+n
x+2n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+3n



Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?
= -----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41



1. What are ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Colour

Wavelength (?)

Violet

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the band

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

2. To find errors:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
62


To find the least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =
49? 50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
49?0.5?
50

= 0.49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Mean Width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of one band
(? )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2
l

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=
5?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? .? =
1?
100

= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.


Main Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)
Observed breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2
m)
Corrected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62


To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =
49? 50
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49?0.5?
50

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

63

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is
calculated as follows.

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm



Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

Rubber band (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? .? ?
=
5?
5
= 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

100

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.


To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58


Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ?.10
-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)


Vernier Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.


3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

breadth of the beam is calculated.

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-2
m
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD =
49? 50
=
49?0.5?
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2
m
63

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.


PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated as follows.

64

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:
Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2
m
Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading at one edge (R1)
(x 10
-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSC ? LC)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Horizontal
Vertical

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m



FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm



Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

Rubber band (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? .? ?
=
5?
5
= 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

100

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.


To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58


Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ?.10
-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)


Vernier Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.


3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

breadth of the beam is calculated.

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-2
m
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD =
49? 50
=
49?0.5?
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2
m
63

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.


PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated as follows.

64

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:
Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2
m
Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading at one edge (R1)
(x 10
-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSC ? LC)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Horizontal
Vertical

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m



65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of
the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm
= ----------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
?
k
g

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope reading
Mean

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Loading Unloading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

Left side
(xi)
Right side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Particle size
2
n
nD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
VSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Time
s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSR
(div)
TR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

x
x+n
x+2n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+3n



Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?
= -----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41



1. What are ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Colour

Wavelength (?)

Violet

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the band

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

2. To find errors:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
62


To find the least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =
49? 50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
49?0.5?
50

= 0.49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
63

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is
calculated as follows.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

64


To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:
Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Scale
Reading at one edge (R1)
(x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)
(x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)
(x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +
(VSC ? LC)
MSR VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

Horizontal
Vertical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and
vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of
the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Page
No.
1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer
37
6.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Position of the equal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-2
s
Mean
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1
With masses at
d2 = x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence
HSC
div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m
Correct reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? 1
2
kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? kg

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load


3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
k
g
Microscope reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Depression
y for M kg

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 W

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (y) = ----------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl. No.

MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
1.

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Mean, d = ---------------------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m
y = -----------?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?10
-2
m)
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =
? ? ? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Left side
(xi)
Right side
(xr)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

To find the size of the particle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 3
?
= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass
plate(D)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Order of
diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fringe (xn )
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Particle size
2
n
nD
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
?
?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2d =
? ? ?
=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24


Optical fiber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find numerical aperture, NA:

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA)
where,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup


29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 2
2
? ?
? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
? k Wm
h r r

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r d
dt
d
MS
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
?

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o
C)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Sl.No.
MSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-2
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
4.

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
31

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove
?2
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o
C above
and 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?
?
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
HSC
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3
m)
Corrected reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C
Time

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Temperature
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?
?
= -------------- deg s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
2 2
2
? ?
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
? k Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h r r
h r d
dt
d
MS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37


Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
? m
2
N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38


To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
maximum current

Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PSR
(x10
-3
m)
HSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x
x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
? 2
?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.


44

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green, ? =
? ?
= = ------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7
m= ----------- ?
47

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength (?)

Violet
Blue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

Order of
the band

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Microscope Reading

Width of 10 bands

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Mean Width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of one band
(? )
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
VSC

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
1 n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40
10 n+45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

Position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)


l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the thin wire
?
?
2
l

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?
=
5?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? .? =
1?
100

= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

= ----------------------------------x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers


No error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.


Main Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)
Observed breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2
m)
Corrected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62


To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =
49? 50
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49?0.5?
50

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

63

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is
calculated as follows.

64

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:
Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Scale
Reading at one edge (R1)
(x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)
(x 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter
(R1- R2)
(x 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +
(VSC ? LC)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ (VSC ? LC)

Horizontal
Vertical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and
vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of
the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm
= ----------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m


66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

67

Expt. No. M4 SPECTRO METER
AIM:
To study the different parts of the spectrometer and their functions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS:
Spectrometer and reading lens
DESCRIPTION:
The collimator consists of two brass tubes, one sliding into the other with the help of a slide
screw. At the outer end of the inner tube, an adjustable slit is attached. At the outer end of the outer tube, a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

collimating lens is fitted. When the slit is illuminated with the source of light, parallel beam of light is obtained
by adjusting the screw attached to the collimator. The collimator is rigidly attached to the base of the
spectrometer.
The telescope consists of an objective lens near the collimator and an eyepiece at the end of
the telescope. Focusing is done with the help of a slide screw. Telescope can be rotated about the central

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical axis. It can be fixed at any position with the help of the main screw. The fine adjustments are done with
the help of tangential screw.
The prism table consists of two identical circular discs provided with three leveling screws. The
prism table is made horizontal with the help of leveling screws. The prism table can be raised or lowered and
can be fixed at any height with the help of a screw. The prism table is capable of rotating about the same

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central vertical axis.
A circular scale is provided with the spectrometer. The circular scale is graduated in degree. Two
vernier scales, 180
o
apart are fitted to a separate circular plate. This circular plate is attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope.

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS:
Before commencing the experiment, the following preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer should be
done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The telescope of the spectrometer is turned towards a white wall and on seeing through it., the
eyepiece is moved to and fro until crosswire is seen clearly.


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

I SEMESTER - R 2017

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,
enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for
the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending
d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interferometer
g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)
SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4.
Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interferometer
37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.
Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M2 Vernier Calipers 58
M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(one oscillation)
s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d1 = x10
-2
m
T1
With masses at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d2 = x10
-2
m
T2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To determine the radius of the wire:
Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale
Reading
PSR
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc
oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20
oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.
Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10
-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
)? ? 2
? 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 1
2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10
-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)
The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?
5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?
10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12


Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L.C =.001cm M = ___________
3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k
g
Microscope reading
Mean

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
Depression

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y for M kg

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Loading Unloading
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
MSR

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 W+150
5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,
screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)
PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

centre of the bar with the help of wax.
The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.
14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

MSR
x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

VSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)
x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

PSR
x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

HSC
div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15


The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale
reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms
-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10
-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------------
Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm
-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?
3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Elastic limit
8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10
-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of diffraction,
(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? =
? ? ? ?
m

Left side

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(xi)
Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m


19

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE


AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) To determine size of the given particle.
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)
M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n ? order of diffraction (no unit)
? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:
The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m
th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? )
The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with
different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Third order, m3; ? 3
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No



Distance between

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screen and glass
plate(D)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

central bright spot and n
th

fringe (xn )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Particle size
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

n
nD
d
x
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =
? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between central bright spot and the n
th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

fiber and the screen X (m)
NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA) = -------------------
= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor
FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,
the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is stimulated emission?
5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the conditions required for laser action?
10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28


Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

steam boiler
FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)
h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
MSR
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10
-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the
metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cabove
?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)
o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
)
? 2
. From

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?mm
Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Time
s
Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg
-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10
-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------
o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
1 1
2 1
2
2 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
? ?
? ?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dt
d
MS
K
? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?


= --------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?
5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is meant by steady temperature?
10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of
the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
2
N
-1
where

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? density of the given liquid (kg m
-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.
Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum current

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)
PSR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
HSR
(div)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x10
-3
m)

x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+n
x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m
-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the
measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic
waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a
maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is
noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)
The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths
(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N
-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by acoustical grating?
6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?


Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the
mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength of the spectral line ? =
? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To adjust for normal incidence:
a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

position.
d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The
telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the
telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter, N = ------------
Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ----------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 1, ? =
? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m = ----------- ?

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter
The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2
Red

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is the condition for diffraction?
2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is meant by polychromatic source?
7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass
plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? m
where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium
vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.
Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.
Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm



Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 n+15
5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 n+40
10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

Rubber band (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(edge of contact)


Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.


53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?
2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6.What is meant by superposition of waves?
7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? .? ?
=
5?
5
= 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of head scale divisions = 100
Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

100

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Screw gauge Diagram:
\

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.
The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To find least count:
Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is
no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) ( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.


To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the
wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.
Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58


Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.
1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ?.10
-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)


Vernier Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (VSC)
(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? 10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.


3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero
of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

breadth of the beam is calculated.

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-2
m
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD =
49? 50
=
49?0.5?
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 0.001 x 10
-2
m
63

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to
the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.


PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

calculated as follows.

64

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:
Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2
m
Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading at one edge (R1)
(x 10
-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSC ? LC)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Horizontal
Vertical

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m



65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of
the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm
= ----------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer


67

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No. M4 SPECTRO METER
AIM:
To study the different parts of the spectrometer and their functions
APPARATUS:
Spectrometer and reading lens

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The collimator consists of two brass tubes, one sliding into the other with the help of a slide
screw. At the outer end of the inner tube, an adjustable slit is attached. At the outer end of the outer tube, a
collimating lens is fitted. When the slit is illuminated with the source of light, parallel beam of light is obtained
by adjusting the screw attached to the collimator. The collimator is rigidly attached to the base of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spectrometer.
The telescope consists of an objective lens near the collimator and an eyepiece at the end of
the telescope. Focusing is done with the help of a slide screw. Telescope can be rotated about the central
vertical axis. It can be fixed at any position with the help of the main screw. The fine adjustments are done with
the help of tangential screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The prism table consists of two identical circular discs provided with three leveling screws. The
prism table is made horizontal with the help of leveling screws. The prism table can be raised or lowered and
can be fixed at any height with the help of a screw. The prism table is capable of rotating about the same
central vertical axis.
A circular scale is provided with the spectrometer. The circular scale is graduated in degree. Two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier scales, 180
o
apart are fitted to a separate circular plate. This circular plate is attached with the
telescope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS:
Before commencing the experiment, the following preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer should be
done.
1. The telescope of the spectrometer is turned towards a white wall and on seeing through it., the
eyepiece is moved to and fro until crosswire is seen clearly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

68

Least count: 1?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
Vernier A Vernier B
MSR
(deg)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
TR = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
MSR
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
(div)
(TR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ray



Least Count for Spectrometer (LC = 1?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Value of 1 M.S.D =1/2 degree
Number of division on the vernier scale =30 division
Since 29 M.S.D are divided into 30 V.S.D
30 VSD = 29 MSD
1VSD =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
1MSD
30

=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 1
degree
30 2

=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
degree
60

Least count = 1 MSD - 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
1 29
? ?
2 60
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = ? ?
'
1
1 ( )
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
o
or minutes or
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)


Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49? 50
=
49?0.5?
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
63

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.


PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is
calculated as follows.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

64


To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2
m
Scale
Reading at one edge (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)
(x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)
(x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +
(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

Horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vertical

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and
vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm
= ----------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

67

Expt. No. M4 SPECTRO METER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To study the different parts of the spectrometer and their functions
APPARATUS:
Spectrometer and reading lens
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The collimator consists of two brass tubes, one sliding into the other with the help of a slide
screw. At the outer end of the inner tube, an adjustable slit is attached. At the outer end of the outer tube, a
collimating lens is fitted. When the slit is illuminated with the source of light, parallel beam of light is obtained
by adjusting the screw attached to the collimator. The collimator is rigidly attached to the base of the
spectrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope consists of an objective lens near the collimator and an eyepiece at the end of
the telescope. Focusing is done with the help of a slide screw. Telescope can be rotated about the central
vertical axis. It can be fixed at any position with the help of the main screw. The fine adjustments are done with
the help of tangential screw.
The prism table consists of two identical circular discs provided with three leveling screws. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

prism table is made horizontal with the help of leveling screws. The prism table can be raised or lowered and
can be fixed at any height with the help of a screw. The prism table is capable of rotating about the same
central vertical axis.
A circular scale is provided with the spectrometer. The circular scale is graduated in degree. Two
vernier scales, 180

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
apart are fitted to a separate circular plate. This circular plate is attached with the
telescope.

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Before commencing the experiment, the following preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer should be
done.
1. The telescope of the spectrometer is turned towards a white wall and on seeing through it., the
eyepiece is moved to and fro until crosswire is seen clearly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

68

Least count: 1?
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier A Vernier B
MSR
(deg)
VSC
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
MSR
(deg)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
(TR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
Reflected
ray

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count for Spectrometer (LC = 1?)
Value of 1 M.S.D =1/2 degree

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of division on the vernier scale =30 division
Since 29 M.S.D are divided into 30 V.S.D
30 VSD = 29 MSD
1VSD =
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1MSD
30

=
29 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degree
30 2

=
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degree
60

Least count = 1 MSD - 1 VSD
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 29
? ?
2 60
?
LC = ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

'
1
1 ( )
60
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
or minutes or
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

69

2. The telescope is focused on to a distant object. On viewing through, the side screw is adjusted to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtain clear well-defined image of the distant object. Now the telescope is ready to receive parallel
rays.

3. The telescope is brought in line with the collimator. On seeing through telescope and collimator, the
silt is adjusted to be vertical and thin.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Now the collimator is adjusted to obtain a well-defined image of the slit without disturbing the
telescope.

5. The prism table is adjusted to be horizontal with the help of spirit level.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

After the preliminary adjustments are over, the least count is determined.
READINGS:
The slit of the spectrometer is illuminated with mercury vapor lamp. The prism table is
adjusted such that the refracting edge is facing the collimator (base of the prism points towards us)
.The telescope is moved towards the left to get the reflected image of the slit. The tangential screw in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the telescope is adjusted so that the slit coincides with the vertical crosswire.

The main scale reading and the vernier scale coincidence are noted.

Main Scale Reading (MSR): It is the reading in the main scale, shown by zero of the vernier scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC): It is the vernier scale division which coincides with any of the main
scale division.
Using MSR and VSC, the total reading (TR) is calculated as follows.

TR = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The different parts of the spectrometer and their functions are studied.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND HUMANITIES


I SEMESTER - R 2017

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

BS8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

? To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? To contribute to the promotion of Academic excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
? To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION
MISSION
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics, Science and fundamentals of engineering,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enabling them to apply, to find solutions for engineering problems and use this knowledge to acquire
higher education.
2. Core competence
To train the students in Engineering Physics so as to apply their knowledge and training to compare,
and to analyze various engineering industrial problems for finding solutions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theoretical learning and
practice that enables them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and to design products.
4. Professionalism
To inculcate professional and effective communication skills, leadership qualities and team spirit for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the students to make them multi-faceted personalities and develop their ability to relate engineering issues
to broader social context.
5. Lifelong learning/ethics
To demonstrate and practice ethical and professional responsibilities in the industry and society by
and large, through commitment and lifelong learning needed for successful professional career.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To demonstrate and apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals in
Engineering physics
b) To determine the Moment of Inertia of given disc and Rigidity modulus of the given wire using
Torsional Pendulum
c) To determine Young?s modulus of a given bar using Non-Uniform bending

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To utilize laser source and grating to estimate the wave length, particle size of given powder and
Numerical Aperture & acceptance angle of given optical fiber
e) To find the Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee?s Disc method
f) To Measure the velocity of ultrasonic wave in a liquid and compressibility of the liquid usingultrasonic
Interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To determine the wavelength of Hg source using grating and spectrometer
h) To find the thickness of a thin wire using Air- wedge method
i) To participate and succeed in competitive exams and visualize and work on laboratory and
multidisciplinary tasks

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4


BS 8161 ? PHYSICSLABORATORY
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.TechProgrammes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

SYLLABUS


To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics, thermal
physics, properties of matter and liquids.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY(Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young? s modulus by Non uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee?s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Completion of the course, the students will be able to: apply physics principles of optics and thermal physics
to evaluate engineering properties of materials.


COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES
5

BS 8161 ? PHYSICS LABORATORY
CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Name of the Experiment (any 5 experiments)
Page
No.
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of Rigidity modulus ? Torsion pendulum
6
2.
Determination of Young ?s modulus by Non uniform bending method
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.
(a) Determination of Wavelength, and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
18
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor ? Lee ?s Disc method.
28
5.
Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid ? Ultrasonic
interferometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37
6.
Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum ? spectrometer grating
42
7.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thickness of a thin wire ? Air wedge method
48
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
M1 Screw gauge 54
M2 Vernier Calipers 58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M3 Travelling Microscope 62
M4 Spectrometer 66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6

TORSIONAL PENDULUM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.1 TORSIONAL PENDULUM

AIM:
To determine the moment of inertia of the given disc and hence to determine the rigidity modulus of
the material of the given suspension wire by torsional oscillations

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Torsional pendulum, two equal masses, stop clock, screw gauge and meter scale

FORMULA:
Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2? (? 2
2
? 1
2
)? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 2
2
? 1
2
kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4
Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
where
m ?mass of the cylinder placed on the disc (kg)
To ?period of the pendulum for a length of l without mass (s)
T1?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from the center of the suspension wire (s)
T2?period of the pendulum for the same length when mass m is placed at a distance d 2
from the center of the suspension wire (s)
a ? radius of the suspension wire (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To determine the time period of the disc:
Length of the wire (l)= --------
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Position of the equal
masses
Time for 10 oscillations Time period
(one oscillation)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

s
Trial-1
s
Trial-2
s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean
s
Without any masses T0
With masses at
d1 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T1
With masses at
d2 = x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
T2

2. To determine the radius of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =0 .01 mm. Zero Error ZE = --------- divisions
Zero Correction ZC = ---------- mm

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Reading
PSR
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Head Scale
Coincidence
HSC
div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading
OR = PSR + (HSCXLC)
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Correct reading
CR = OR ? ZC
3
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean = ----------------
3
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m



9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Torsional pendulum is suspended from vertical chuck. The length of the suspension wire is measured
between the vertical chuck and the chuck attached to the uniform circular disc (i). The circular disc is twisted
slightly without masses on the disc. Now it executes torsional oscillations. Care is taken to see that the disc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillates without wobbling. Time taken for 20 oscillations is noted with the help of a stop clock. Two trials are
taken. The average of these two trial readings is calculated from which the period of oscillations is found out
as T0.
Two identical cylindrical masses each of mass m are symmetrically placed on the disc on either side
of the wire at a distance d from the center of the disc. As before the disc is gently twisted. Time taken for 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

oscillations is noted from which the period of oscillation is calculated as T1.
The cylindrical masses are placed at a distance d2 from the center and the experiment is repeated.
The mean time period of oscillations is calculated T2.
The diameter of the specimen wire is measured accurately with the help of the screw gauge, at
various places on the wire. The average diameter and hence the radius of the wire is calculated as r.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of inertia and the rigidity modulus are determined by the substituting the value of m, T 0, T1, T2,
T3, and l in the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg m
2

Mass of cylindrical mass, m = ----------- ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

kg
Closest distance of the mass from the centre of the suspension wire, d1 = ------------ ? 10
-2
m
Farthest distance of the mass from the centre of suspension wire, d2= ------------? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Period of oscillation without mass, To = ------------- s
Period of oscillation with mass at d1, T1= ------------ s
Period of oscillation with mass at d2, T2 = ------------- s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Moment of Inertia of the disc, I =
2? (? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
)? ? 2
? 2
2
? 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
kg m
2
= --------------- kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------- kg m
2

Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? 4
Nm
-2
Moment of inertia, I = ------------------ kg m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Length of the wire, l = ------------------- ? 10
-2
m
Time of oscillation, To = ------------------ s
Radius of the wire, a = ------------------- ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m
Rigidity modulus of the wire, n =
8? ? ? 2
? 4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nm
-2
= ----------------------
Rigidity modulus, n = ------------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
(i)
The moment of inertia of the given circular disc, I = --------------- kg m
2
(ii)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The rigidity modulus of the material of the given wire, n = -------------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. State Hooke?s law.
2. Define ?Rigidity modulus
3. Define ?Moment of inertia
4. What is meant by torsional oscillation?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is period of oscillation?
6. What is meant by twisting couple?
7. Define ? Shearing stress
8. Define ? Shearing strain
9. What is the unit of rigidity modulus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of torsional pendulum?


Viva ? voce
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s Modulus ? Non Uniform Bending
To determine depression (y):
L.C =.001cm M = ___________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
? kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No

Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
10
?
?
k

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g
Microscope reading
Mean

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
Depression
y for M kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Loading Unloading
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
MSR

2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
VSC

div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 W
2 W+50
3 W+100
4 W+150

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 W+200
6 W+250

Mean (y) = ----------
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.2 YOUNG?S MODULUS BY NON ? UNIFORM BENDING
AIM:
To determine the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, by non-uniform bending method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Travelling microscope, wooden bar, knife- edge, weights hanger, slotted weight, vernier calipers,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

screw gauge and pin
FORMULA:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =
? ? 2
4? ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? Nm
-2
Where,
g ? acceleration due to gravity (9.8 ms
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
l ? length of the bar between two knife edges (m)
b ? breadth of the bar (m)
d ? thickness of the bar (m)
y ? depressiont in the scale reading due to the change of mass M (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The given wooden bar, for which young?s modulus is to be determined, is paced symmetrically on the
two knife edges. The distance between the knife edges is measured as the length of the bar (l). It is adjusted
to be, say, 60 cm. the weight hanger is suspended at the centre of the bar. A pin is held vertically at the
centre of the bar with the help of wax.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The given bar is brought to elastic mood by loading and unloading the bar with slotted weights in steps
of 50 g. This is repeated for two or three times. With the hanger as dead load W, the microscope is focused on
to the tip of the pin. The tangential screw of the microscope is adjusted so that the image of the tip of the pin
just touches the horizontal cross wire of the eyepiece. The main scale reading and the vernier scale
coincidence corresponding to this position are noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14

To find the breadth using vernier calipers, b:
Least count = ---------- cm Zero error = --------- div.
= ---------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m Zero correction = ?ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC
div.
Observed reading
OR = MSR+(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
Correct Reading
CR = OR ? ZC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 10
-2
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, b = ------------------------?10
-2
m
To find the thickness using screw gauge, d:
Least count = ---------- mm Zero error = --------- div.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ---------- ?10
-3
m Zero correction =ZE ?LC= --------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

PSR
x 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

HSC
div.
Observed reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OR = PSR+ (HSC ? LC)
x 10
-3
m
Correct Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
x 10
-3
m
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = ---------------------------?10
-3
m
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated by adding weights in steps of 50 g and every time the microscope is
adjusted for coincidence. The corresponding readings are noted. The experiment is repeated by unloading the
weights in steps of 50 g and the corresponding readings are tabulated. From this table, the shift in the scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading, say y, for a change of mass M is found out.
The breadth of the bar is measured at various points with the help of vernier calipers. Similarly the
thickness of the bar is measured by screw gauge. Substituting the values of M, y, l, d, b and g in the formula,
the young?s modulus of the material of the given bar is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16

CALCULATION:
Young?s modulus of the material of the material of the given bar, E =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 2
4? ? 3
? Nm
-2
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 ms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
Length of the bar between two knife edges, l = ------------ ?10
-2
m
Breadth of the bar, b = ----------- ?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Thickness of the bar, d = ----------- ?10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

y = -----------?10
-2
m
E =
? ? 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4? ? 3
? Nm
-2

= ---------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Young?s modulus, E = ----------- Nm
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Young?s modulus of the material of the given bar, E = ---------- Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2


1. Define ? Young?s modulus
2. What is meant by Non-uniform bending?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Stress and strain
4. State Hooke?s law.
5. Define ? Neutral axis
6. What is the SI unit of young?s modulus?
7. Define ? Elastic limit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Elasticity
9. What are the factors affecting elasticity?
10. Define ? Elastic fatigue

Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18


To find the wavelength of the laser beam, ?:
Distance between the screen and the grating, D = ------------?10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
Number of lines per meter length of the grating, N = --------------- Lines per meter
Sl. No.
Order of diffraction,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(m)
Reading of the diffracted image
(?10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )
(deg.)
? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ? ?
m

Left side
(xi)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Right side
(xr)
Mean
(xm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, ? = ---------------- m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19

Expt. No.3(a) WAVELENGTH OF LASER LIGHT AND PARTICLE SIZE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
(i) To determine the wavelength of the given laser light.
(ii) To determine size of the given particle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Diode laser, grating, screen, given micro particles, scale and screen.
FORMULAE:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain, 2d =
? ? ? m
Where
? ? ?angle of diffraction (deg.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ?order of diffraction (No unit)
N ?number of lines per metre length of the grating (m
-3
)
n ? order of diffraction (no unit)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? wavelength of laser light used (m)
D ? distance between the glass plate and the screen (m)
? ? - distance between the central bright spot and the nth fringe (m)
PROCEDURE:
TO FIND THE WAVELENGTH OF THE GIVEN LASER LIGHT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The laser source, grating and screen are placed properly as shown in figure. The diode laser is kept
horizontally and switched on. Extreme care should be taken to avoid direct exposure of laser light on eyes.
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The grating is held normal to the laser beam by adjusting the grating in such a way that the reflected
laser beam from the grating coincides with incident laser beam. Now the diffracted laser spots of various
orders can be seen on the screen, placed on the other side of the grating.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The distance of the different orders on either side of the central spot are measured as x randxi and are
tabulated.The mean value of xrandxiare calculated as xm for the m
th
order diffracted light. The distance
between the grating and the screen is measured as D. Hence, the angle of diffraction for the m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
order,
? ? = ? ?1
(
? ? ? )

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for different orders and the readings are tabulated. From the table, ? for
each order is calculated. Substituting the value of ?, the corresponding order of diffraction and the number of
lines per meter length of the grating, the wavelength is calculated.

TO FIND THE SIZE OF THE GIVEN MICRO PARTICLE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The lycopodium powder having fine micro particles of nearly same size is sprinkled on a glass plate.
This glass plate is kept between laser source and screen.
Now the particles present in the glass plate diffract laser beam from the source. By adjusting the
distance between the glass plate and the screen, a circular fringe pattern is obtained on the screen with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

different orders of fingers. Now distance between the screen and the glass plate (D) is measured.
The distance of the first order and the second order fringe from the centre of spot are also measured.
Using the formula, the particle size is found out. The experiment is repeated for different D values.
22

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the size of the particle:

CALCULATION:
(i) Wavelength of the given laser source of light, ? =
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Number of lines per metre in the grating, N = ------------ lines per metre.
First order, m1; ? 1
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 1
?
= ------------
Second order, m2; ? 2
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? =
? ? 2
?
= ------------
Third order, m3; ? 3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 3
?
= ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Fourth order, m4; ? 4
= ------------
Wavelength, ? =
? ? 4
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------
Fifth order, m5; ? 5
= ------------

Sl.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Distance between
screen and glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate(D)
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
diffraction
(n)
Distance between the
central bright spot and n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th

fringe (xn )
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m
Particle size
2
n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

nD
d
x
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23

Wavelength, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? 4
?
= ------------
Mean wavelength of the given laser light, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Grain size or diameter of the grain. 2d =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ? ?
Order of differaction, n = --------------
Wavelength of laser light used, ? = ------------- m
Distance between glass plate and the screen, D = ------------ m
Distance between central bright spot and the n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

th
fringe,? ? = ------------ m
2d =
? ? ?
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ------------ m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(i) Wavelength of the laser beam, ? = -------------- m
(ii) Average size of the particle = --------------- m

24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Optical fiber

To find numerical aperture, NA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.
Diameter of the circular patch
D(m)
Distance between the tip of the
fiber and the screen X (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean NA =
Therefore, the acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1
(NA) = -------------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -------------------


25

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.3(b) NUMERICAL APERTURE AND ACCEPTANCE ANGLE
AIM:
To measure the numerical aperture and the acceptance angle of the given fiber cable
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Optical fiber cable with source, NA jig and in-line adaptor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
The numerical aperture, NA =
? (4? 2
+? 2
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2

Acceptance angle, ? = Sin
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(NA)
where,
D ? diameter of the circular patch (m)
X ? distance between the tip of the fiber and the screen (m)
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

One end of the one metre fiber cable is connected to the laser light source and the other end
to the NA jig as shown in figure. The AC main is plugged in and the laser light is adjusted so that it appears at
the end of the fiber on the NA jig, the intensity knob is adjusted to get maximum intensity.
The white screen with the four concentric circles (10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm diameter) is held
vertically at a suitable distance to make the red spot from the emitting fiber coincides with the 10 mm circle,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the diameter (D) of the spot is noted. The distance (X) of the screen from the fiber end is recorded.
The procedure is repeated for 20 mm, 30 mm, 40 mm diameter circles and the readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The numerical aperture, NA = ----------------
Acceptance angle, ? = ----------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is semiconductor diode laser?
2. What is meant by active material in laser?
3. What is meant by LASER?
4. What is stimulated emission?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the characteristics of laser radiation?
6. What is homo?junction laser?
7. What is hetero?junction laser?
8. What are the applications of semiconductor laser?
9. What are the conditions required for laser action?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Numerical aperture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
28

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Lee?s disc setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29

Expt. No. 4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF A BAD CONDUCTOR
BY LEE?S DISC METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Lee?s disc apparatus, bad conductors, stop-clock, thermometers, screw gauge, vernier calipers and
steam boiler

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FORMULA:
Thermal conductivity of a bad conductor,
? ?
? ? ? ?
1 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 1
2
2 2
2
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt
d

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M ? Mass of the metallic disc (Kg)
S ? Specific heat capacity of the metallic disc ( J Kg
-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
? rate of cooling at steady temperature (
o
C/s)
d ? thickness of the bad conductor (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h ? thickness of the metallic disc (m)
r?radius of the metallic disc (m)
1
? ? steady temperature of the steam chamber (
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
2
? ? steady temperature of the Metallic disc (
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
The thickness of the bad conductor say card board and thickness of the metallic disc are determined
using a screw gauge. The radius of the metallic disc is found using a vernier caliper. The mass of a metallic
disc is also found using a common balance. The readings are tabulated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30

To find the radius of the metallic disc (r) using Vernier Calipers
Least count = 0.01cm Zero error = ? ?div

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Zero correction = ? ?cm
= --------- ?10
-2
m
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(x10
-2
m)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
OR = MSR +(VSC x LC)
(x10
-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-2
m)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3
4

Mean radius, r = --------------------------------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
To find the thickness of the bad conductor (d) using Screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
OR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
CR = OR ? ZC
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.
4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Mean, d = -------------------------------- x10
-3
m
31

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The whole Lee?s disc apparatus is suspended from a stand as shown in the figure. The given bad
conductor is placed in between the metallic disc and the steam chamber. Two thermometers T1 and T2 are
inserted into the respective holes.
Steam from the steam boiler is passed into the steam chamber until the temperature of the steam
chamber and the metallic disc are steady. The Steady temperature (?1) of the steam chamber and (?2) of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

metallic disc recorded by the thermometers are noted.
Now the bad conductor is removed and the steam chamber is placed in direct contact with the metallic
disc. The temperature of the disc rapidly rises. When the temperature of the disc rises about 10
o
Cabove

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?2
o
C, the steam chamber is carefully removed after cutting of the steam supply.
When the temperature of the disc reaches 10
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above the steady temperature of the disc i.e. (?2+
10)
o
C , stop clock is started. Time for every one degree celsius fall of temperature is noted until the metallic
disc attains a temperature (?2 - 10)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
A graph is drawn taking time along the x-axis and temperature along the y-axis. The cooling curve is
obtained .To obtain the rate of the cooling (
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
from this graph, a triangle is drawn by taking 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C above
and 1
o
Cbelow the steady temperature ?2. Then the slope AB / BC gives the rate of cooling at(
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
)
? 2
. From
these readings and using the given formula thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32

To find the thickness of the metallic disc (h) using screw gauge
Least count = 0.01mm Zero error = ? ?div
Zero correction = ? ?mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
PSR
(x10
-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

HSC
(div.)
TR = PSR + (HSC x LC)
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected reading
CR = TR ? ZC
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
1
2
3
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5

Mean, h = ------------------------------ x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the rate of cooling of metallic disc:
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C
Time
s
Temperature
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Mass of the disc, m= ---------- x10
-3
kg
Specific heat capacity of the disc,c = 385 J kg

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1
Rate of cooling at ?2,
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
= -------------- deg s
-1
Radius of the disc, r = ---------- x10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Height of the disc, h = ---------- x10
-2
m
Thickness of the bad conductor, d = ---------- x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3 m
Temperature of steam, ?1 = ---------
o
C
Steady temperature of the disc, ?2 = -------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C
Thermal conductivity,
? ?
? ? ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 1
2 1
2
2 2
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
? ?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
?
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? k Wm
h r r
h r d
dt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d
MS
K
? ? ?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= --------------------

= -------------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The thermal conductivity of the given bad conductor by Lee?s disc method, K = -------------- Wm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
K
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by thermal conductivity?
2. What is meant by Rate of cooling?
3. Does the value of thermal conductivity depend on the dimension of the specimen?
4. Is there any reason to take the specimen in the form of a disc?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Can this method be used for good conductors?
6. What is lee's disc method?
7. What are the differences between good conductor and bad conductor?
8. What are the methods used to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor?
9. What is meant by steady temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is meant by specific heat capacity?

Viva ? voce
36

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 5 ULTRASONIC INTERFEROMETER

AIM:
To determine the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in a given liquid and to find the compressibility of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the liquid using ultrasonic interferometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Ultrasonic interferometer (high frequency) generator, measuring cell, the experimental liquid
and coaxial cables
FORMULA:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves v = f ? ms
-1
where,
f ?frequency of the ultrasonic waves (Hz)
? ? wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2) Compressibility of the liquid ? =
1
? 2
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
N
-1
where
? ? density of the given liquid (kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
)
v? velocity of the ultrasonic waves with in the liquid (m s
-1
)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DESCRIPTION:
The interferometer consists of (i) high frequency generator and (ii) measuring cell. The high
frequency generator is used to excite the quartz plate fixed at the bottom of the measuring cell.
The exited quartz plate generates ultrasonic waves in the experimental liquid contained in the cell. A micro
ammeter is provided to observe the change in the current.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Two control knobs are also provided in the generator for the purpose of sensitivity regulation and also
adjustment. The measuring cell is a double walled cell to maintain constant temperature during

38

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid:

Order of
maximum current

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Distance for n
maximum current, d
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Wavelength
?=2d/n
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
PSR
(x10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
HSR
(div)
TR
(x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

x
x+n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x+2n
x+3n

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Wavelength, ? = ------------------ x10
-3
m
Frequency of ultrasonic waves = 2 MHz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
1) The Velocity of the ultrasonic waves, v = f?
= ---------- m s
-1
The density of the given liquid ? = ---------- kg m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
2) Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? =
1
? 2
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= -----------
Adiabatic compressibility of the liquid, ? = --------------


39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experiment.A fine micrometer arrangement is fixed at the top of the interferometer, enables the reflector
pates to move upward or downward through a known distance.
PRINCIPLE:
The velocity of the ultrasonic waves is determined using the interferometer. The principle used in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement of velocity is based on the accurate determination of the wave length (?) of ultrasonic waves
in the liquid. The ultrasonic waves are reflected back by a removable metallic plate parallel to the crystal
.These two ultrasonic waves superimpose producing stationary wave pattern within the medium.

If the separation between these two plates is exactly an integral multiple of ?/2 of the ultrasonic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

waves, acoustic resonance is produced in the standing waves.

This acoustic resonance gives rise to an electrical reaction on the generator and the anode current of the
generator becomes maximum.
PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The measuring cell is connected to the output terminal of the high frequency generator through a
shielded cable. The cell is filled with an experimental liquid before switching on the generator. The
ultrasonic waves move normally from the quartz crystal till they are reflected back from the movable plate
and the standing waves are formed in the liquid in between the reflector plate and the quartz crystal.
The micrometer is slowly moved till the anode current of the high frequency generator shows a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum in the meter. Now the initial reading of the micrometer screw is noted. If the micrometer is rotated
in the same direction, the current various between minimum and maximum.Micrometer screw is rotated in
the same direction until n
th
maximum in the micro ammeter is reached. The reading in the micrometer is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted.
For n number of maximum anode current, the distance moved (d) is measured with the help of
micrometer. Hence
d = n?/2Therefore, ? = 2d/n
The frequency of the ultrasonic waves is noted as f (Hz)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The experiment is repeated for various n number of maximum and the readings are tabulated.
Knowing the meaning value of ?, the velocity of the ultrasonic waves is calculated.
40

If the distance is now increased or decreased and the variation is exactly one half wavelengths

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(?/2) or multiple of it, anode current becomes maximum. From the knowledge of wave length (?) the velocity
v can be obtained using the following relation.
v = f ?
By substituting the value of the density of the given liquid and the velocity of the ultrasonic waves in
the given liquid, the adiabatic compressibility of the given liquid is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
i) Wave length of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = ---------- m
ii) Velocity of the ultrasonic waves in the liquid = --------- m s-
1
iii) Compressibility of the given liquid = --------- N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-1
m
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are ultrasonic waves?
2. Define Piezo ? Electric effect
3. Explain inverse Piezo ? Electric effect
4. Is ultrasonic wave,an electro-magnetic wave? Explain.
5. What is meant by acoustical grating?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Give the properties of ultrasonic waves.
7. What are the methods used to produce ultrasonic waves?
8. What is meant by SONAR?
9. What is meant by Compressibility?
10. What are the applications of ultrasonic waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Normal Incidence Angle of diffraction

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Exp. No. 6 SPECTROMETER - GRATING

AIM:
To standardize the grating using sodium vapour lamp and to use it to find the wavelength of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mercury spectra using spectrometer
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Spectrometer grating, sodium vapour lamp and mercury vapour lamp
FORMULA:
Wavelength of the spectral line ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
m
? ? angle of diffraction (deg.)
N ? number of lines / meter length of the grating ( m
-1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

)
M ? order of the spectra (No unit)
PROCEDURE:
The preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are done.
To adjust for normal incidence:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) The slit of the collimator is illuminated by the sodium vapour lamp. The telescope is brought in
the line with the direct ray. The tangential screw of the telescope is adjusted so that the vertical cross wire
coincides with the direct ray. The direct ray reading in the Vernier is rotated.
b) The telescope is turned through 90
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in any direction and is fixed.
c) The grating is mounted vertically on the prism table. On viewing through the telescope, the
grating alone is rotated until the reflected image of the slit is obtained. The grating is slightly adjusted so
that the reflected image is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire. The grating is fixed at this
position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) Now the vernier is released and is rotated along with the grating through 45
?
in the proper
direction and is fixed. Now the grating is normal to the direct ray. This is the normal incidence position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44

To find the wavelength, ?:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45

To find N:
The telescope is turned left or right to view the diffracted image of the slit. The telescope is brought in
line with the first order image and is fixed. The readings given by the both the verniers are noted. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is brought to other end. As before the readings are taken. This difference between these readings
gives 2? from which, ? is calculated.
Substituting? , ? for sodium light and m = 1, the number of lines per meter length of the grating is
calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the wavelength,?:
Sodium vapour lamp is replaced by mercury lamp without disturbing the position of the grating. On
either side of the direct white ray, mercury spectrum of different order is obtained.
The telescope is moved towards left side of the direct ray and is made to coincide with the prominent
colours of the first order, starting from red to violet and the corresponding vernier readings are noted. Then the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope is moved towards right side of the direct ray and as before the experiment is repeated from violet to
red. The corresponding readings are noted.
The readings are tabulated and from this, the angle of diffraction for each colour is calculated
.substituting the value for each colour, N and m the wavelength of each colour of light are calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46

CALCULATION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find N:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ----------------------- lines per metre.
To find the wavelength,?:

No of lines per meter, N = ------------

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of spectra, m = -------------
Wavelength of the spectral line, ? =
? ?
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Substituting the angle of diffraction for different colours, the wavelength for
Violet, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?

Blue, ? =
? ?
= = ----------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?7
m = ----------- ?

Green, ? =
? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= = ------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

Yellow 1, ? =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? ?
= =------------x10
?7
m= ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Yellow 2, ? =
? ?
= =-------------x10
?7
m = ----------- ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red, ? =
? ?
= = ----------- x10
?7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m= ----------- ?
47

RESULT:
No of lines per meter length of the grating, N = ------------- lines/ meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The wave length of the mercury spectra is given below
Colour

Wavelength (?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Violet
Blue
Green
Yellow 1
Yellow 2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Red



1. What is the condition for diffraction?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is plane transmission diffraction grating?
3. How are commercial gratings made?
4. What type of grating do you use for your experiment?
5. What is meant by monochromatic source?
6. What is meant by polychromatic source?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Which color has higher wavelength?
8.What is meant by normal incidence?
9. Which color has least wavelength?
10. What is meant by spectrometer?
Viva ? voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49

Expt. No. 7 DETERMINATION OF THICKNESS OF A THIN WIRE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To determine the thickness of the given wire using air wedge method
APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Vernier microscope, two optical plane rectangular glass plates, sodium vapour lamp, thin wire, glass

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plate and condensing lens
FORMULA:
Thickness of the wire, t =
?
2? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

where,
? ? wavelength of the sodium light (5893 ?)
? ?distance of the wire from the edge of the contact (m)
? ? ? ean fringe width (m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:
Two optical plane glass plates are placed one over another. One of their edges is tied with rubber
band. The given wire is placed in between the two plates at the other end. This forms an air wedge
arrangement.
This arrangement is placed on the horizontal bed of the vernier microscope. Light from the sodium

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vapour lamp is rendered parallel with the help of a condensing lens. The parallel beam of the light is allowed to
fall on a glass plate inclined at 45
o
. The refracted light from the plate is made to fall vertically on the air wedge.
The interference pattern is seen through the eye-piece of the microscope held just above the air wedge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Large number of equi-spaced alternative bright and dark fringes can be seen. The vertical cross wire
is made to coincide with any one of the dark fringes (n) at one end. The microscope reading given by the
vertical scale is noted. Then the cross wire is made to coincide with n + 5, n + 10, n + 15 etc., up to n+50 and
the corresponding reading are noted. The readings noted are tabulated and from the reading, bandwidth is ?
calculated. The distance between the wire and the edge of contact is measured with the microscope.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Assuming the wavelength of sodium light, the thickness of the wire is determined
50

Determination of the Band Width (?):
Travelling Microscope Readings: L.C =0.001cm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Order of
the band

Microscope Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Width of 10 bands

2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
Mean Width
of one band
(? )
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
MSR
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
?
? m
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div
TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? m
1 n
2 n+5
3 n+10
4 n+15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 n+20
6 n+25
7 n+30
8 n+35
9 n+40

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 n+45

Mean (?) = __________ x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51

To Determine the distance between edge of contact and wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Position

MSR
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

div

TR=MSR+(VSCxLC)
2
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
? m

Rubber band (R1)
(edge of contact)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given wire(R2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

l = (R1~ R2) = --------------
2
10
?
? m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CALCULATION:
Thickness of the thin wire
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
l
t ? metre

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Thickness of the given wire using air wedge method = __________________________ m.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.What is meant by interference of light?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.Is there any loss of energy in interference phenomenon?
3. What are interference fringes?
4.What is the shape of fringes in wedge shaped film?
5. Explain the reason for colour formation in soap bubbles.
6.What is meant by superposition of waves?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7.What is meant by air wedge method?
8.What is meant by fringe width?
9. What are constructive and destructive interferences?
10.What is the application of air wedge experiment?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva ? voce
54

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count of screw gauge:
One pitch scale division = 1 mm
Distance moved upon 5 rotations = 5 mm
Pitch =
? ? ? .? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=
5?
5
= 1 mm
Number of head scale divisions = 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count =
? ?
? .? =
1?
100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Least Count = 0.01 ? 10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Screw gauge Diagram:
\


55

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M1 SCREW GAUGE

AIM:
To determine the diameter of the given thin wire using Screw gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:
Screw gauge and thin wire
DESCRIPTION:
The screw gauge consists of a U ? shaped metallic frame having a stud A at one end and a screw B
passing through the other end. A scale graduated in millimeter called pitch scale is engraved on the screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The head of the screw is divided into 100 divisions and this is called head scale. When the head of the screw
is rotated, the head scale moves on the pitch scale and the tip of the screw moves through the frame towards
the stud A.
PROCEDURE:
1. To find least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count is defined as the least measurement of the instrument.

2. To find errors:
The head is rotated till the tip of the screw just touches the stud A. If the zero of the head scale just
coincides with the zero of the pitch scale and also lies on the base line of the pitch scale, then there is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

no error.
Positive error: If zero of the head scale lies below the base line of the pitch scale, then the error is positive
and the correction is negative. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading
when multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56

To find the thickness of the wire:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?.mm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10
-3
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC = ?..10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m
Sl. No.

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) ( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)


Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
(div.)
Observed thickness
OT = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)
Corrected Thickness
CT = OT ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-3
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average diameter, d = ? 10
-3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57

Negative error:If zero of the head scale lies above the base line, then the error is negative and the
correction is positive. The head scale division coinciding with the base line is noted. This reading is subtracted
from 100 and then multiplied with least count. This gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the thickness of the wire:
The given wire is gently gripped between the stud and the tip of the screw gauge. The pitch
scale reading (PSR) and the head scale coincidence (HSC) are noted. The observed thickness of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire is given by the following equation.
Observed thickness of the wire (OT) = PSR + (HSC ? LC)
The observed thickness of the wire is corrected as follows,
Corrected thickness of the wire (CT) = OT ? ZC
Observations are repeated by placing the screw gauge at various places of the wire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Readings are tabulated and the average thickness of the wire is calculated.

RESULT:
Thickness of the given thin wire, t = --------------------------------- mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= ----------------------------------x10
-3
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

No error


59

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt. No.M2 VERNIER CALIPERS

AIM:
To determine the breath of the given beam using vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Vernier calipers and given beam

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier calipers consist of a long steel plate. One edge of the plate is graduated in centimeter and the
other edge in inch. This is called main scale. Each centimeter is divided into 10 divisions and hence one main
scale division is equal to 1 mm.
A fixed jaw A is attached to one end of the plate. Another movable jaw B can slide freely on the plate.
An auxiliary scale called vernier scale is attached to this jaw B. The vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROCEDURE:

1. To find least count of vernier calipers:
Least count is the smallest measurement of the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
10 VSD = 9 MSD
= 9 mm
1 VSD = 0.9 mm
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 mm ? 0.9 mm = 0.1 mm
= 0.01 cm
Least count = 0.01 ? 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60

To find the breadth of the beam:
Least Count = ?.cm zero error (ZE) = ? div.
= ?.10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m zero correction (ZC) = ? ZE ? LC

Mean breadth = ?.10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main Scale Reading
(MSR)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)


Vernier Scale
Coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div.)
Observed breadth
OT = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
( ? 10
-2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

m)
Corrected
Thickness
CT = OB ? ZC
( ? 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

61

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To find errors:
The two jaws of the vernier calipers are pressed together without any material in between them.
If zero of the vernier scale coincides with the zero of the main scale, then the instrument has no error.
Positive error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the right of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
positive and the correction is negative. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the positive error.

Negative error: If zero of the vernier scale is to the left of the zero of the main scale, then the error is
negative and the correction is positive. The vernier scale division coinciding with any main scale division is
noted. This vernier scale division multiplied with least count gives the negative error.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To find the breadth of the given beam:

The given beam is gently gripped between the two jaws. The main scale division just before the zero

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of the vernier scale is noted as Main Scale Reading (MSR). The vernier scale division which coincides with
any of the main scale division is noted as Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC).

Observed breadth of the beam (OB) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The observed breadth of the beam is corrected as follows,
Corrected breadth of the beam (CB) = OB ? ZC

Observations are repeated by gripping the beam at various places. Readings are tabulated and the average
breadth of the beam is calculated.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
Breadth of the given beam = --------------------------------- cm

= ----------------------------------x10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the least count:
20 MSD = 10 mm
1 MSD = 0.5 mm
No. of vernier scale divisions = 50
1 VSD =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49? 50
=
49?0.5?
50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.49 mm
Least Count= 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
= 0.5 ? 0.49
= 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm
Least Count = 0.001 x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m
63

Expt. No. M3 TRAVELLING MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:

To determine the diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

APPARATUS REQUIRED:

Travelling microscope, capillary tube and reading lenses

DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Travelling microscope consists of a compound microscope. It can slide along a graduated vertical
pillar, called vertical main scale. This vertical pillar can slide along a graduated horizontal base, called
horizontal main scale. Hence the microscope can be moved both in the horizontal and vertical directions.

There are two verniers, one attached to the microscope is moved vertically and the other attached to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the base of the pillar is moved horizontally.

In the main scale, each one is divided into 20 equal divisions. Hence the value of the one main scale
division is 0.5 mm. The vernier scale is divided into 50 equal divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Focusing can be done using the screw provided in the microscope.


PROCEDURE:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the diameter of the bore of the capillary tube:
The given capillary tube is held horizontally with the help of a stand. The microscope is focused on to
the bore of the capillary. The vertical crosswire of the microscope is adjusted to be tangential with the left side
of the bore. The main scale reading and vernier scale coincidence are noted. Then the observed reading is
calculated as follows.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

64


To find the diameter of the bore of the Capillary tube:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = ?cm = ? x 10
-2
m
Scale
Reading at one edge (R1)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x 10
-2
m)
Reading at the other edge (R2)
(x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
Diameter
(R1- R2)
(x 10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

-2
m)
MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR +
(VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR VSC
(OR) = MSR
+ (VSC ? LC)

Horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vertical

Mean diameter = ?x 10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observed reading (OR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

Now vertical crosswire is adjusted to be tangential with the right side of the bore. The main scale reading and
vernier scale coincidence are noted. The CR value is calculated. From the two ORs, the horizontal diameter of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the bore is determined. Similarly, vertical diameter is also determined using horizontal crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The mean diameter of the bore of the given capillary tube = ----------------------- cm
= ----------------------- x10
-2
m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Spectrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

67

Expt. No. M4 SPECTRO METER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

AIM:
To study the different parts of the spectrometer and their functions
APPARATUS:
Spectrometer and reading lens
DESCRIPTION:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The collimator consists of two brass tubes, one sliding into the other with the help of a slide
screw. At the outer end of the inner tube, an adjustable slit is attached. At the outer end of the outer tube, a
collimating lens is fitted. When the slit is illuminated with the source of light, parallel beam of light is obtained
by adjusting the screw attached to the collimator. The collimator is rigidly attached to the base of the
spectrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The telescope consists of an objective lens near the collimator and an eyepiece at the end of
the telescope. Focusing is done with the help of a slide screw. Telescope can be rotated about the central
vertical axis. It can be fixed at any position with the help of the main screw. The fine adjustments are done with
the help of tangential screw.
The prism table consists of two identical circular discs provided with three leveling screws. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

prism table is made horizontal with the help of leveling screws. The prism table can be raised or lowered and
can be fixed at any height with the help of a screw. The prism table is capable of rotating about the same
central vertical axis.
A circular scale is provided with the spectrometer. The circular scale is graduated in degree. Two
vernier scales, 180

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
apart are fitted to a separate circular plate. This circular plate is attached with the
telescope.

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Before commencing the experiment, the following preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer should be
done.
1. The telescope of the spectrometer is turned towards a white wall and on seeing through it., the
eyepiece is moved to and fro until crosswire is seen clearly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

68

Least count: 1?
Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier A Vernier B
MSR
(deg)
VSC
(div)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
MSR
(deg)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(div)
(TR) = MSR + (VSC ? LC)
(deg)
Reflected
ray

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count for Spectrometer (LC = 1?)
Value of 1 M.S.D =1/2 degree

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number of division on the vernier scale =30 division
Since 29 M.S.D are divided into 30 V.S.D
30 VSD = 29 MSD
1VSD =
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1MSD
30

=
29 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degree
30 2

=
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degree
60

Least count = 1 MSD - 1 VSD
=

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 29
? ?
2 60
?
LC = ? ?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

'
1
1 ( )
60
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
or minutes or
?
?
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

69

2. The telescope is focused on to a distant object. On viewing through, the side screw is adjusted to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

obtain clear well-defined image of the distant object. Now the telescope is ready to receive parallel
rays.

3. The telescope is brought in line with the collimator. On seeing through telescope and collimator, the
silt is adjusted to be vertical and thin.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Now the collimator is adjusted to obtain a well-defined image of the slit without disturbing the
telescope.

5. The prism table is adjusted to be horizontal with the help of spirit level.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

After the preliminary adjustments are over, the least count is determined.
READINGS:
The slit of the spectrometer is illuminated with mercury vapor lamp. The prism table is
adjusted such that the refracting edge is facing the collimator (base of the prism points towards us)
.The telescope is moved towards the left to get the reflected image of the slit. The tangential screw in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the telescope is adjusted so that the slit coincides with the vertical crosswire.

The main scale reading and the vernier scale coincidence are noted.

Main Scale Reading (MSR): It is the reading in the main scale, shown by zero of the vernier scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier Scale Coincidence (VSC): It is the vernier scale division which coincides with any of the main
scale division.
Using MSR and VSC, the total reading (TR) is calculated as follows.

TR = MSR + (VSC ? LC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

RESULT:
The different parts of the spectrometer and their functions are studied.
70

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LIST OF PROJECTS
1. Simple electric motor
2. Bridge using pop sticks
3. Hydraulic lift
4. Hydraulic Crane

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Simple Electromagnet
6. Fire alarm
7. Mosquito repellent
8. Battery car
9. Hydraulic room cleaner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Direct solar pool heater
11. Total Internal reflection Experiments
12. Musical instrument using PVC tube
13. Creating sound using heat
14. Rocket launcher

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Magnetic levitation
16. Electromagnetic Crane
17. Solar cell
18. Periscope
19. Water level indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. Simple propeller
21. Propeller display
22. Electromagnetic induction
23. The world first electric lamp
24. Power generation from speed break

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25. Wind mill
26. Floating ball in air
27. Fuel cell
28. Home made air condition
29. Horror House

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30. Water candle
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice